LG | LAD-9600 | Owner's Manual | LG LAD-9600 Owner’s Manual

LG LAD-9600 Owner’s Manual
‫‪LAD-M9600_ARABIC‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪LAD-9600 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻭﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺇﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺫﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ )ﺧﺪﻣﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﺖ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺭﻛﺰ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻻ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰﺍ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ؛ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺸﻴﻖ ﻣﻜﺎﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ )ﺍﻟﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ 60 ~ 10 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺫﺍﺫ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ؛ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺘﺼﺎﺩﻡ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻷﻥ ﻧﻈﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺗﺮﻓﻴﻬﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻠﺔ؛ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ؛ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ E‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ‪ .،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺪﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪2-3‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪4-6‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪7-8‬‬
‫‪9-19‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪9 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪10 .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪10 ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪11 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪12 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪12 .................................................................. .‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪13-15 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪16 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪16 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء ‪16 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪17 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪17 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪17 .............................................................................. ISO-DIN‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪18 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪18 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ /‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪18 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪18 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ‪18 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ‪18 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪19 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪19 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻜﺎﺕ )ﻹﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ( ‪19 ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪19 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) EQ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ(‪19 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ‪20 .........................................REAR OUT‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪20 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪20 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪20 .............................................................................‬‬
‫‪21-27‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪21 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪21-22 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪23-24 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪24-25 ....................................................................................... DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ ‪25 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ‪26 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪26 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪27 ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪28-35‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪28 ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪28 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪28-30 ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ‪30 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪31 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪31 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪31 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪32 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪32-33 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‪33 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪34 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪34 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪35 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪35 .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪35 ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪36-39‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪36 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪36 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ‪36 ......................................................................‬‬
‫‪37-39‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪CD/MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ‪37 ................................................. MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪37 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪37 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪37 ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪37 .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪37 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪38 ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪38 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪38 ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ‪38 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪39 ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪40-43‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DVD/VCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪40 ................................................................. DVD / VCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪40 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪41 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪41 .............................................................. .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪41 .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪41 ...................................................... .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪41 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ /‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪41 ............................................................................ .VCD‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ‪42 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‪42 .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪42 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪42 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪43 .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪43 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪44-46‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪44 ............................................................................ DivX‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪45 .................................................................... .‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪45 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪45 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪45 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪45 ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪46 .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‪46 .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪46 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪47 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪47 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪48 ..............................................................................USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪48 ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﻟﻠﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﺜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪WMA‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ً‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ؛ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫)ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(VCD‬‬
‫)ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺮﺃ ‪ DVD±R‬ﻭ‪ DVD±RW‬ﻭ‪ CD-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪CD-RW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪.WMA‬‬
‫• ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪) CD-R/RW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (DVD±R/±RW‬ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪) CD-R/RW‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(DVD±R/±RW‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺫﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻼﻉ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺈﻣﺴﺎﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪8 cm‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ »‪.«2‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ »‪ «2‬ﺃﻭ »‪ «ALL‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ dvd‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ‪Car DVD‬‬
‫‪ Receiver‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫» ‪) «Check regional code‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪EJECT‬‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪PHONE‬‬
‫‪SRS‬‬
‫‪BAND‬‬
‫‪RSE‬‬
‫‪SRC‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪8 9 10‬‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪15 16 17‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪CLOSE‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪) RSE .11‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪TILT‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪BAND .12‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪SRS .13‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.SRS‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪OPEN/CLOSE‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫‪) .VOL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‬
‫• ﺇﺳﻜﺎﺕ )ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫‪) v/V/b/B ARROW‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪BRIGHT‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻄﻲ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪WIDE‬‬
‫• ﺑﺤﺚ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫‪.9‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪PHONE .14‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪EQ .15‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .16‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪.17‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .18‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪.19‬‬
‫ﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) SRC .10‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪EJECT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪PHONE‬‬
‫‪RDS‬‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫‪BAND‬‬
‫‪RSE‬‬
‫‪TA/AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪CLOSE‬‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫‪SRC‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪BRIGHT‬‬
‫‪WIDE‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪WIDE‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪.2R‬‬
‫‪+/- BRIGHT‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ×‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ × ‪) 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ × ‪) 2‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ × ‪2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ × ‪4‬‬
‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ × ‪4‬‬
‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪) v/V/b/B‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻄﻲ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫• ﺑﺤﺚ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9‬‬
‫• ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ )‪.(1-6‬‬
‫‪REPEAT‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪SHUFFLE‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪SCAN‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪DVD SUBTITLE‬‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD ANGLE‬‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫‪BAND‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪ FM‬ﻭ)‪.MW(AM‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫‪DISC MENU‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻊ ‪.PBC‬‬
‫‪.9‬‬
‫‪VOLUME‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪POWER‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) RSE‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪?m M? SKIP‬‬
‫• ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪m M SCAN‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺜﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ )ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪x STOP B PLAY X PAUSE‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪DVD SEARCH‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪MUTE .10‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻘﻠﻢ ﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ )‪ 3‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ( ‪.CR2025‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻴﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ؛ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻧﻈﻔﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪EJECT‬‬
‫‪RESET‬‬
‫‪RESET‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؛ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) RESET‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫* ‪OPTICAL OUT‬‬
‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ)ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) DIMMER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺼﻬﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )‪(-‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(+‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ ١٢+‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺣﺎﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ؛ ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺗﻲ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(+‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ +12‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )‪(-‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫)ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ]ﺍﻟﻴﺪ[(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺸﻴﻖ ﻣﻜﺎﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺎﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ( ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍ ﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫‪REMOTE ON‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪TO IGNITION‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ACC‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻧﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫‪REVERSE GEAR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ؛ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪(15‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﺠﻲ‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺴﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ISO‬؛ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪) REAR OUT‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‬
‫)‪(VIDEO IN‬‬
‫‪) PRE-OUT‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫)ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‬
‫‪) AUX IN‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‬
‫‪CAM‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪VCR‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ؛ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺷﺒﻚ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺷﺒﻚ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺯﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪EJECT‬‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪PHONE‬‬
‫‪RDS‬‬
‫‪BAND‬‬
‫‪RSE‬‬
‫ﻣﻐﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ‪TA/AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ؛ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫‪SRC‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‘‘ ’’ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪CLOSE‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻖ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء )ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫‪NAVI‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪NAVI‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻍ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪WIDE‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ؛ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺎﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺳﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻠﻮﻩ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ؛ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻓﻚ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺭ ‪ A‬ﺍﻉ ﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺬ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ISO-DIN‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪.ISO-DIN‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻠﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻠﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫‪RSE‬‬
‫‪SRC‬‬
‫‪RSE‬‬
‫‪SRC‬‬
‫‪RSE‬‬
‫‪SRC‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪) .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪) DISP‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﺃﻭ ‪) EJECT‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ((‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.VOL‬‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ /‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪EJECT‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪PHONE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪RDS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪TA/AF‬‬
‫‪BAND‬‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫‪RSE‬‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫‪SRC‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ TILT‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫‪CLOSE‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ‪.FLIP‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻴﻒ؛‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ FLIP‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺻﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪10‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪NAVI‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪NAVI‬‬
‫‪WIDE‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫‪EJECT‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪.EJECT‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪NE‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪EJECT‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ VOL‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪PHONE‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪SRS‬‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫‪BAND‬‬
‫‪SRC‬‬
‫‪RSE‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ؛ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ‪.‬‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫‪CLOSE‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻜﺎﺕ )ﻹﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪CLOSE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ VOL‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻷﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪EJECT‬‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪ TILT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ FLIP‬ﺃﻭ )‪ OPEN(CLOSE‬ﺃﻭ ‪(EJECT‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪PHONE‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SRC‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪FM t DISC t USB t VIDEO t AUX‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫‪RDS‬‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫‪BAND‬‬
‫‪LIP‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪RSE‬‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫‪SRC‬‬
‫‪TA/AF‬‬
‫‪EJECT‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) EQ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ EQ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪CLOSE‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪FLAT t POP t CLASSIC t ROCK tJAZZ t‬‬
‫‪VOCAL t SALSA t SAMBA t USER t WOW‬‬
‫• ‪POP‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺭ ﻭﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻨﺘﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : CLASSIC‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻻﻭﺭﻛﺴﺘﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ROCK‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺭﺩ ﺭﻭﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻴﻔﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪JAZZ‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭﺷﻌﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : VOCAL‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪SALSA‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺼﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : SAMBA‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪USER‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪WOW‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(SRS‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪SRS Labs, Inc‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪BRIGHT‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ WOW‬ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SRS Labs, Inc‬‬
‫‪WIDE‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪PHONE‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪CLOSE‬‬
‫‪RDS‬‬
‫‪TA/AF‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪NAVI‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪NAVI‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ‪REAR OUT‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ‪.REAR OUT‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ RSE‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪RSE DVD t RSE USB t RSE VIDEO t RSE AUX‬‬
‫• ‪RSE DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪RSE USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪RSE VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.VIDEO IN‬‬
‫• ‪RSE AUX‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪.AUX IN‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.RSE‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪RSE OFF‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪REAR‬‬
‫‪ OUT CAM‬ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.SETUP‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Setback‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) No‬ﻻ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Adjust Picture‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Adjust Dimmer‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ(‬
‫‪) Auto Dimmer control‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) No‬ﻻ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫•‬
‫‪BG Animation‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪Clock‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Summer time‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ(‬
‫• ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Setting Clock‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ V‬ﺃﻭ ‪ v‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Rear Camera‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫• ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺸﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪) SOUND‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫• ‪) Balance/Fader‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Left‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Right‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ – ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Front‬ﺃﻣﺎﻡ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Rear‬ﺧﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻮﺕ – ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪Woofer‬‬
‫‪) Output Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪Cut-off Frequency‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 80/120/160‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺑﻨﻘﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪SRS WOW‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )‪.(10 ~ 1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪SRS‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : FOCUS‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : TruBass‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻮﺭﻱ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪SRS Labs, Inc‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ WOW‬ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SRS Labs, Inc‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) User Equalizer‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ V‬ﺃﻭ ‪ v‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪High Pass Filter‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Rear Speaker‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Beep‬ﺻﺎﻓﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪) Beep Pattern‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ(‬
‫• ‪) Long Key‬ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ؛‬
‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Beep Volume‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪) High/Medium/Low .‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪/‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) DVD Language‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬
‫‪) Audio Language‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Subtitle Language‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ OFF‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫•‬
‫‪Aspect Ratio‬‬
‫‪Wide‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪) 16:9‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Letter Box‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪) 4:3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ؛ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Panscan‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.4:3‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ؛ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Lock‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ؛ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪.9 – 0‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.8 - 1‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ OFF‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬
‫‪.0000‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ”‪ ،“210499‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﺃﻭﻻ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.(DVD‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Password‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪.9 – 0‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪.9 – 0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‘‘‪ ’’Enter‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ V‬ﺃﻭ ‪ v‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ END‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬
‫‪.0000‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﺲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) DivX Registration‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪(DivX‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) DivX® VOD‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ( ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﻭﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.DivX® VOD‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪visit www.divx.com/vod‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ®‪Divx‬‬
‫‪ VOD‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.www.divx.com/vod‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪) SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.SOURCE‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪FM/MW‬‬
‫• ‪DVD/CD‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪SETUP‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.SETUP‬‬
‫• ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪VIDEO IN‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.VIDEO IN‬‬
‫• ‪AUX‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪.AUX IN‬‬
‫• ‪ : SOURCE OFF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SRC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ؛‬
‫‪TILT‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪FLIP.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ - .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪51‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪CLOSE‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪EJECT‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪CLOSE‬‬
‫‪PHONE‬‬
‫‪RDS‬‬
‫‪BAND‬‬
‫‪RSE‬‬
‫‪PHONE‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫‪SRC‬‬
‫‪SRS‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺠﻬﺎ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‪SRC‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪RSE‬‬
‫‪BAND‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth Hand-free‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫‪Profile‬‬
‫‪1.0‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪Object Push Profile 1.1‬؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻷﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ؛ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ PHONE‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.SETUP‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Connect Phone‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.CONNECT PHONE‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪.Search‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ Searching‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء؛ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.CANCEL‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪SEARCH‬‬
‫‪.RESULT‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ؛ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫‪ visible to all devices‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ‪.Visibility‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ؛ ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺠﺢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪.CONNECT PHONE‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪BRIGHT‬‬
‫‪WIDE‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ؛ ﻳﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪ INPUT PIN CODE‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻫﻮ‬
‫‪(1324‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ؛ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ،9 ~ 0‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Enter‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫‪.CONNECT PHONE‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ؛ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.PHONE‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‘ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ’ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻪ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ CONNECT PHONE‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ Auto Connection‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.INFORMATION‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 31‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ PHONE‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.SETUP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Connect Phone‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.CONNECT PHONE‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪.CONNECT PHONE‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪Searching a Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ device‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ؛ ﻳﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪.INPUT PIN CODE‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ؛ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪.connecting through the unit‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪Hands-free‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪connection‬؛ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ PHONE‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ »ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ« ﻭ«ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ«‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ؛ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ؛ ﻓﺎﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ؛ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Connect Phone‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) BT Information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪) CONNECT PHONE‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Search‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Edit‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.INFORMATION‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) Info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭ‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻭ‪) Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.INFORMATION‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) .Info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.INFORMATION‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫)‪INFORMATION (CONNECT PHONE‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ]ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ[(‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Auto Connection‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ CONNECT PHONE‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ Auto Connection‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.INFORMATION‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Manual Connection‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ CONNECT PHONE‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪ Manual Connection‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.INFORMATION‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ؛ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.CONNECT PHONE‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 6‬ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪) BT Informtion‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Rename‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) End‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Show/Hide‬ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ‪ /‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫• ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) PHONE BOOK‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪) Phone‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ( ﺃﻭ ‪Home‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Office‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Search‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 32‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Add‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ‘‪.’...waiting‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Telephone No. Item Transmission‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ Sending the phone number‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Delete All‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪) Edit‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.INFORMATION‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) Info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭ‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻭ‪) Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.INFORMATION‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤًﺎ؛ ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪INFORMATION (PHONE BOOK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ]ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ[(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺘﻪ؛ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ SEND‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ‪.END‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ SEND‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪SEND‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪ ،10‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ SEND‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪ ،10‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪0‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ؛ ﻳﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.CALL FROM‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Accept‬ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮ ًﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﺠﻞ ﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.SEND‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫‪PHONE‬‬
‫‪RDS‬‬
‫‪TA/AF‬‬
‫‪BAND‬‬
‫‪RSE‬‬
‫‪SRC‬‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SRC‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ BAND‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪FM1 t FM2 t FM3 t AM‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ?‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪.?m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) AS (Auto Scan‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )‪ FM1‬ﻭ‪ FM2‬ﻭ‪ FM3‬ﻭ‪ (AM‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.AutoScan‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )‪ FM1‬ﻭ‪ FM2‬ﻭ‪ FM3‬ﻭ‪ (AM‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪.(6 – 1‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪.(6 – 1‬‬
‫‪NAV‬‬
‫‪WIDE‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 18‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ‪ FM‬ﻷﻥ ‪ FM1‬ﻭ‪ FM2‬ﻭ‪FM3‬‬
‫ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪CD/MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ‪MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ CD-ROM‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪CD-RW‬‬
‫)‪ DVD-ROM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD+R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.(DVD+RW‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ MP3 /WMA‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ 48 - 16‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ)‪، (MP3‬‬
‫‪ 44.1 – 8‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪(WMA‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ /‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 320 - 8‬ﻙ ﺏ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪) (MP3‬ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ‪(VBR‬‬
‫‪ 160 - 5‬ﻙ ﺏ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(WMA‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ‪ CD-R/CD-RW‬ﻫﻮ ”‪ISO‬‬
‫‪“9660‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪) FILE SYSTEM‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ”‪ ،“Direct-CD‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ”‪ ،“Easy-CD Creator‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﺰﻭ ‪.9660‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺃﻥ ﻳﻼﺣﻈﻮﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ MP3 /WMA‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻟﻤﻨﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ?‪ M‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ?m‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ?m‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪CD/MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ‪. MP3 WMA‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ LIST‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ؛ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Repeat‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off t Track... CD‬‬
‫‪Off t One t Folder... MP3 WMA‬‬
‫• ‪ : Track‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : One‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Folder‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) SHUFFLE‬ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Shuffle‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off t On... CD‬‬
‫‪Off t Folder... MP3 WMA‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Folder‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪SCAN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Scan‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off t On... CD‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪CD/MP3/WMA‬‬
‫‪) INFORMATION‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Information‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺤﺘﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪CD TEXT/‬‬
‫‪.ID3 TAG‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪CD TEXT‬؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪ID3 TAG‬؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪) ID3 TAG‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DVD/VCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DVD / VCD‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪) “Disc reading‬ﺟﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.B‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ‘‘ ’’ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ VCD‬ﻟﻪ ‪PBC‬؛ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ PBC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪Video 2.0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ‪. DVD‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ V‬ﺃﻭ‪ v‬ﺃﻭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ‪. VCD .‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ ،9 ~ 0‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DVD/VCD‬‬
‫‪) Play‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ x‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Pause‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ** ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ?‪ M‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ?m‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ?m‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫)×‪.(100× ،16× ،8× ،6× ،4× ،2‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،VCD‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪(16× ،8× ،4× ،2×) :‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ /‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪VCD‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻮﻗﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.MENU (VCD MENU‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﺃﻭ ‪ V‬ﺃﻭ ‪ v‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : ENTER‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DVD/VCD‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪.Search‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ ،9 ~ 0‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫)‪(TITLE/CHAPTER/TIME‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Audio‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Subtitle‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ANGLE‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Angle‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DVD/VCD‬‬
‫‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off t Chapter t Title... CD‬‬
‫‪Off t Track t All ... MP3 WMA‬‬
‫• ‪) Chapter‬ﻓﺼﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Title‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Track‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ؛ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD/CD‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 41‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪) ” Disc reading‬ﺟﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.B‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DivX‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﺗﺤﺖ ‪) 720x576‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﻃﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ DivX‬ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ‪ً 40‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،DivX‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫” _ ” ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪ 30‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﻌﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪avi، .mpg، .mpeg :‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪- SubRip(*.srt/*.txt‬‬
‫)‪- SAMI(*.smi‬‬
‫)‪- SubStation Alpha(*.ssa/*.txt‬‬
‫)‪- MicroDVD(*.sub/*.txt‬‬
‫)‪- SubViewer 1.0(*.sub‬‬
‫)‪- SubViewer 2.0(*.sub/*.txt‬‬
‫)‪- TMPlayer(*.txt‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪“DIVX3.xx”, “DIVX4.xx”, “DIVX5.xx”, “XVID”,‬‬
‫‪“MP43”, “3IVX”.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫”‪“Dolby Digital”, “PCM”, “MP3”, “DTS‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 8-48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪،(MP3‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 320 - 8‬ﻙ ﺏ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(MP3‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DivX‬‬
‫‪) Play‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ x‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Pause‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ** ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.B‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ?‪ M‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ?m‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )×‪،2‬‬
‫×‪.(16× ،8× ،6× ،4‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ LIST‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DivX‬‬
‫‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off t One t Folder t All...‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ : One‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Folder‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Audio‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Subtitle‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.JPG‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﺗﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣًﺎ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPG‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ : JPG‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‬
‫‪) 3840 × 5120‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪) 1536 × 2048‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪CLOSE‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬؛ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ USB detected‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.B‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ LIST‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ 999‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫‪FLIP‬‬
‫‪TILT‬‬
‫‪EJECT‬‬
‫‪ARROW‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪PHONE‬‬
‫‪RDS‬‬
‫‪BAND‬‬
‫‪RSE‬‬
‫‪SRC‬‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺘﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺨﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪/‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﺨﺎﺯﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻓﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﻬﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻣﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻤﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺫﺭﺑﻴﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﻜﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺳﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻼﺭﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﻼﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺒﺮﺍﻧﺘﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻭﺯﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪6566‬‬
‫‪6565‬‬
‫‪6570‬‬
‫‪8381‬‬
‫‪6577‬‬
‫‪6582‬‬
‫‪7289‬‬
‫‪6583‬‬
‫‪6588‬‬
‫‪6590‬‬
‫‪6665‬‬
‫‪6985‬‬
‫‪6678‬‬
‫‪6890‬‬
‫‪6672‬‬
‫‪6682‬‬
‫‪6671‬‬
‫‪7789‬‬
‫‪6669‬‬
‫‪7577‬‬
‫‪6765‬‬
‫‪9072‬‬
‫‪6779‬‬
‫‪7282‬‬
‫‪6783‬‬
‫‪6865‬‬
‫‪7876‬‬
‫‪6978‬‬
‫‪6979‬‬
‫‪6984‬‬
‫‪7079‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻳﺴﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻏﻠﻴﺸﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻮﺍﺭﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺟﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﻠﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻧﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻤﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺯﺍﺧﺎﺳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻏﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪7074‬‬
‫‪7073‬‬
‫‪7082‬‬
‫‪7089‬‬
‫‪7176‬‬
‫‪7565‬‬
‫‪6869‬‬
‫‪6976‬‬
‫‪7576‬‬
‫‪7178‬‬
‫‪7185‬‬
‫‪7265‬‬
‫‪7387‬‬
‫‪7273‬‬
‫‪7285‬‬
‫‪7383‬‬
‫‪7378‬‬
‫‪7365‬‬
‫‪7165‬‬
‫‪7384‬‬
‫‪7465‬‬
‫‪7487‬‬
‫‪7578‬‬
‫‪7583‬‬
‫‪7575‬‬
‫‪7589‬‬
‫‪7579‬‬
‫‪7585‬‬
‫‪7679‬‬
‫‪7665‬‬
‫‪7686‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻨﺠﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻻﺟﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻻﻳﺎﻻﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﺍﺛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺪﻭﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻐﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻭﺭﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺷﺘﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻳﺘﺸﻮﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺘﻮ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻳﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺴﻜﺮﻳﺘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻜﺘﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪7678‬‬
‫‪7684‬‬
‫‪7775‬‬
‫‪7771‬‬
‫‪7783‬‬
‫‪7776‬‬
‫‪7784‬‬
‫‪7773‬‬
‫‪7782‬‬
‫‪7779‬‬
‫‪7778‬‬
‫‪7865‬‬
‫‪7869‬‬
‫‪7879‬‬
‫‪7982‬‬
‫‪8065‬‬
‫‪8083‬‬
‫‪7065‬‬
‫‪8076‬‬
‫‪8084‬‬
‫‪8185‬‬
‫‪8277‬‬
‫‪8279‬‬
‫‪8285‬‬
‫‪8377‬‬
‫‪8365‬‬
‫‪7168‬‬
‫‪8382‬‬
‫‪8372‬‬
‫‪8378‬‬
‫‪8368‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺟﺎﻟﻮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺟﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺗﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺠﺮﻳﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻧﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺑﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺘﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻻﺑﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﻠﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻛﺴﻮﺯﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﺸﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻟﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪8373‬‬
‫‪8375‬‬
‫‪8376‬‬
‫‪8379‬‬
‫‪6983‬‬
‫‪8385‬‬
‫‪8387‬‬
‫‪8386‬‬
‫‪8476‬‬
‫‪8471‬‬
‫‪8465‬‬
‫‪8484‬‬
‫‪8469‬‬
‫‪8472‬‬
‫‪6679‬‬
‫‪8473‬‬
‫‪8479‬‬
‫‪8482‬‬
‫‪8475‬‬
‫‪8487‬‬
‫‪8575‬‬
‫‪8582‬‬
‫‪8590‬‬
‫‪8673‬‬
‫‪8679‬‬
‫‪6789‬‬
‫‪8779‬‬
‫‪8872‬‬
‫‪7473‬‬
‫‪8979‬‬
‫‪9085‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻐﺎﻧﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻨﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻔﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﺯﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻟﻮﻣﺒﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻧﻐﻮ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺳﺘﺎ ﺭﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻤﺎﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻛﻮﺍﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻔﺎﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪AU‬‬
‫‪AT‬‬
‫‪BE‬‬
‫‪BT‬‬
‫‪BO‬‬
‫‪BR‬‬
‫‪KH‬‬
‫‪CA‬‬
‫‪CL‬‬
‫‪CN‬‬
‫‪CO‬‬
‫‪CG‬‬
‫‪CR‬‬
‫‪HR‬‬
‫‪CZ‬‬
‫‪DK‬‬
‫‪EC‬‬
‫‪EG‬‬
‫‪SV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻴﻮﺑﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺠﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺭ ﻫﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻣﺎﻛﺪﻭﻧﺎﻟﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻨﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻛﺴﻤﺒﻮﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ET‬‬
‫‪FJ‬‬
‫‪FI‬‬
‫‪FR‬‬
‫‪DE‬‬
‫‪GB‬‬
‫‪GR‬‬
‫‪GL‬‬
‫‪HM‬‬
‫‪HK‬‬
‫‪HU‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪ID‬‬
‫‪IL‬‬
‫‪IT‬‬
‫‪JM‬‬
‫‪JP‬‬
‫‪KE‬‬
‫‪KW‬‬
‫‪LY‬‬
‫‪LU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺪﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﺎﻛﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺠﻴﺮﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺍﺟﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪MY‬‬
‫‪MV‬‬
‫‪MX‬‬
‫‪MC‬‬
‫‪MN‬‬
‫‪MA‬‬
‫‪NP‬‬
‫‪NL‬‬
‫‪AN‬‬
‫‪NZ‬‬
‫‪NG‬‬
‫‪NO‬‬
‫‪OM‬‬
‫‪PK‬‬
‫‪PA‬‬
‫‪PY‬‬
‫‪PH‬‬
‫‪PL‬‬
‫‪PT‬‬
‫‪RO‬‬
‫‪RU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻼﻧﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻏﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺟﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺯﺑﻜﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺘﻨﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻳﻤﺒﺎﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪SA‬‬
‫‪SN‬‬
‫‪SG‬‬
‫‪SK‬‬
‫‪SI‬‬
‫‪ZA‬‬
‫‪KR‬‬
‫‪ES‬‬
‫‪LK‬‬
‫‪SE‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫‪TW‬‬
‫‪TH‬‬
‫‪TR‬‬
‫‪UG‬‬
‫‪UA‬‬
‫‪US‬‬
‫‪UY‬‬
‫‪UZ‬‬
‫‪VN‬‬
‫‪ZW‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪Bluetooth Hand-free‬‬
‫‪ Profile 1.0‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪Object Push Profile 1.1‬؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻷﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ؛ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫‪Nokia‬‬
‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫‪Motorola‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫‪3230‬‬
‫‪6021‬‬
‫‪6230‬‬
‫‪6680‬‬
‫‪6630‬‬
‫‪8800‬‬
‫‪N70‬‬
‫‪SGH-Z500‬‬
‫‪SGH-E7700‬‬
‫‪SGH-D600‬‬
‫‪SPH-V6900‬‬
‫)‪L6 (L7‬‬
‫‪V3‬‬
‫‪E1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫‪Sony Ericsson‬‬
‫‪Siemens‬‬
‫‪LG‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫‪W810i‬‬
‫‪K700i‬‬
‫‪K750i‬‬
‫‪V800‬‬
‫‪SL75‬‬
‫‪SP65‬‬
‫‪U8210‬‬
‫‪U8290‬‬
‫‪M4410‬‬
‫‪KU730‬‬
‫‪KG800‬‬
‫‪P7200‬‬
‫‪S5200‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪ 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻭﺍﻁ × ‪ 4‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ )ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ‪ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪Ω 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ ‪ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ × ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ 55 × 280 × 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ × ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ 40 × 163.8 × 256.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻣﻢ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ ‪ 2.28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻛﺠﻢ )ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ ‪ 1.12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻛﺠﻢ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 7‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ ‪TFT LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪234 × 480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪) CCFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(L‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪CD/DVD/VCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 20 -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ‪% 0.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ )‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ‪ 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 107.9 – 87.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 108 – 87.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ‪% 1.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫)‪AM (MW‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 1720 – 520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1620 - 522‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ‪% 1.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﻟﻠﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪.http://www.lge.com/support/software.jsp‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻝ ﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ؛ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺇﻝ ﺟﻲ‬
‫‪LG Electronics ESPANA S.A.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫‪LG Electronics U.K. Ltd‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ‪ /‬ﺃﻳﺮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫‪0870 873 5454‬‬
‫‪LG Electronics France‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬
‫‪LG Electronics Deutschland GmbH‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫‪0825-826-822‬‬
‫‪0825-825-592‬‬
‫‪01805 4737 84‬‬
‫‪LG Electronics Italia S.p.A‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫‪39 199600099‬‬
‫‪LG Electronics Hellas S.A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫‪LG Electronics Benelux B.V‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻜﺴﻤﺒﻮﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫‪+30-210-4800-564/8‬‬
‫‪801 11 200 900‬‬
‫‪070-233-557‬‬
‫‪32-70-233-557‬‬
‫‪0900-543-5454‬‬
‫‪36-06-40-545454‬‬
‫‪+359-070-1-5454‬‬
‫‪801 54 54 54‬‬
‫‪LG Electronics Portugal, S,A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻝ‬
‫‪808-78-5454‬‬
‫‪LG Electronics Nordic AB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‬
‫‪0771 41 4379‬‬
‫‪8088 5758‬‬
‫‪0800 116 587‬‬
‫‪800 18 740‬‬
‫‪420 810 555 810‬‬
‫‪RUMANIA‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫‪40 31 228 3542‬‬
‫‪CZECH REPUBLIC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺎ‬
‫‪420 810 555 810‬‬
‫‪421 850 111 154‬‬
‫‪LG ELECTRONICS MAGYAR KFT‬‬
‫‪LG Electronics Polska Sp. z.o.o‬‬
‫‪Austria‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪902 500 234‬‬
‫* ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء؛ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪.www.lge.com‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﺎً ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺠﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬
‫®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Cascade‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻠﻚ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Bluetooth® SIG‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪MFL36334738 : P/NO‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising